3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
46 @dircategory Software development
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57 version @value{VERSION}.
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 version @value{VERSION}.
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
256 @section Command-line Options
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
360 @include at-file.texi
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438 @cindex common allocation
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
536 @cindex little-endian objects
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine specific performance.
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
627 @cindex incremental link
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
730 How common symbols are allocated.
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
735 The values assigned to symbols.
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
765 @cindex read-only text
770 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
771 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
772 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
776 @cindex read/write from cmd line
780 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
781 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
782 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
783 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
784 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
785 specification published by Microsoft.
790 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
791 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
792 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
793 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
795 @kindex -o @var{output}
796 @kindex --output=@var{output}
797 @cindex naming the output file
798 @item -o @var{output}
799 @itemx --output=@var{output}
800 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
801 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
802 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
804 @kindex -O @var{level}
805 @cindex generating optimized output
807 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
808 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
809 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
810 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
811 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
812 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
813 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
815 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
816 @item -plugin @var{name}
817 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
818 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
819 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
820 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
823 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
824 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
825 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
826 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
827 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
828 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
829 just copy in the newest one.
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
857 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
858 flags governing input file handling.
861 @kindex --emit-relocs
862 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
865 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
866 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
867 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
868 in larger executables.
870 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
872 @kindex --force-dynamic
873 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
874 @item --force-dynamic
875 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
879 @cindex relocatable output
881 @kindex --relocatable
884 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
885 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
886 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
887 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
889 @c ; see @option{-N}.
890 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
891 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
892 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
894 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
895 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
896 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
897 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
898 with input files in other formats at all.
900 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
902 @kindex -R @var{file}
903 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
904 @cindex symbol-only input
905 @item -R @var{filename}
906 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
907 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
908 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
909 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
910 programs. You may use this option more than once.
912 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
913 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
914 the @option{-rpath} option.
918 @cindex strip all symbols
921 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
924 @kindex --strip-debug
925 @cindex strip debugger symbols
928 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
930 @kindex --strip-discarded
931 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
932 @item --strip-discarded
933 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
934 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
939 @cindex input files, displaying
942 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
944 @kindex -T @var{script}
945 @kindex --script=@var{script}
947 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
948 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
949 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
950 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
951 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
952 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
953 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
954 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
957 @kindex -dT @var{script}
958 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
960 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
961 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
962 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
964 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
965 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
966 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
967 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
968 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
969 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
970 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
973 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
974 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
975 @cindex undefined symbol
976 @item -u @var{symbol}
977 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
978 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
979 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
980 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
981 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
982 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
984 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
985 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
986 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
989 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
990 @cindex symbols, require defined
991 @cindex defined symbol
992 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
993 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
994 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
995 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
996 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
997 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
998 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1001 @cindex constructors
1003 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1004 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1005 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1006 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1007 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1008 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1009 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1010 @samp{-r} for the others.
1012 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1013 @cindex orphan sections
1014 @cindex sections, orphan
1015 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1016 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1017 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1019 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1023 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1024 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1025 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1028 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1029 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1032 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1036 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1039 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1041 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1043 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1044 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1045 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1046 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1047 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1048 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1058 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1059 lists the supported emulations.
1062 @kindex --discard-all
1063 @cindex deleting local symbols
1065 @itemx --discard-all
1066 Delete all local symbols.
1069 @kindex --discard-locals
1070 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1072 @itemx --discard-locals
1073 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1074 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1075 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1077 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1078 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1079 @cindex symbol tracing
1080 @item -y @var{symbol}
1081 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1082 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1083 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1084 to prepend an underscore.
1086 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1087 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1089 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1091 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1092 for Solaris compatibility.
1094 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1095 @item -z @var{keyword}
1096 The recognized keywords are:
1100 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1102 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1103 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1104 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1105 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1106 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1107 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1108 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1109 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1110 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1111 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1112 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1116 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1117 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1121 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1122 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1124 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1125 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1126 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1127 using pages of this size.
1130 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1131 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1132 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1134 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1135 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1136 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1137 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1138 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1139 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1140 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1141 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1145 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1148 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1149 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1150 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1153 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1154 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1155 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1156 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1157 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1158 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1161 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1165 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1166 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1167 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1170 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1171 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1172 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1173 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1174 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1178 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1179 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1180 libraries not so marked.
1183 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1184 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1185 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1186 Lazy binding is the default.
1189 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1191 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1192 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1195 Allow multiple definitions.
1198 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1199 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1202 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1203 should ignore any default library search paths.
1206 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1209 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1212 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1215 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1217 @item noextern-protected-data
1218 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1219 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1220 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1221 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1222 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1225 @item noreloc-overflow
1226 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1227 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1228 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1231 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1232 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1233 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1234 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1238 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1242 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1243 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1244 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1245 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1246 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1249 @itemx noseparate-code
1250 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1251 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1252 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1253 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1256 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1257 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1258 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1260 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1261 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1262 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1263 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1268 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1269 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1270 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1273 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1274 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1275 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1279 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1282 @cindex groups of archives
1283 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1284 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1285 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1286 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1288 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1289 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1290 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1291 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1292 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1293 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1294 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1297 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1298 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1301 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1302 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1303 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1304 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1305 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1306 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1307 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1308 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1309 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1310 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1311 restore the old behaviour.
1314 @kindex --no-as-needed
1316 @itemx --no-as-needed
1317 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1318 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1319 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1320 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1321 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1322 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1323 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1324 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1325 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1326 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1327 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1328 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1329 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1331 @kindex --add-needed
1332 @kindex --no-add-needed
1334 @itemx --no-add-needed
1335 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1336 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1337 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1338 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1340 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1341 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1342 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1346 @kindex -call_shared
1350 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1351 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1352 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1353 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1354 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1355 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1359 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1360 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1361 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1362 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1363 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1373 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1374 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1375 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1376 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1377 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1378 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1379 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1380 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1381 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1386 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1387 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1388 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1389 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1390 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1391 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1392 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1393 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1395 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1396 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1397 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1398 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1399 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1400 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1401 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1402 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1403 libraries and position independent executables.
1405 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1408 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1409 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1410 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1411 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1412 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1413 which support shared libraries.
1415 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1416 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1418 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1419 @item --dynamic-list-data
1420 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1422 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1425 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1427 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1431 @kindex --check-sections
1432 @kindex --no-check-sections
1433 @item --check-sections
1434 @itemx --no-check-sections
1435 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1436 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1437 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1438 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1439 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1440 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1441 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1442 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1445 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1446 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1447 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1448 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1449 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1450 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1451 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1452 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1453 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1454 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1455 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1456 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1458 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1459 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1460 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1461 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1462 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1463 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1464 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1467 @cindex cross reference table
1470 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1471 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1472 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1474 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1475 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1476 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1477 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1478 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1479 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1482 @cindex common allocation
1483 @kindex --no-define-common
1484 @item --no-define-common
1485 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1486 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1487 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1489 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1490 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1491 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1492 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1493 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1494 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1495 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1496 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1497 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1498 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1500 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1501 @cindex section groups
1503 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1504 @item --force-group-allocation
1505 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1506 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1507 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1508 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1509 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1510 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1512 @cindex symbols, from command line
1513 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1514 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1515 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1516 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1517 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1518 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1519 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1520 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1521 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1522 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1523 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1524 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1526 @cindex demangling, from command line
1527 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1528 @kindex --no-demangle
1529 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1530 @itemx --no-demangle
1531 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1532 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1533 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1534 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1535 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1536 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1537 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1538 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1539 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1541 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1542 @kindex -I@var{file}
1543 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1545 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1546 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1547 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1548 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1551 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1552 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1553 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1554 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1555 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1556 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1558 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1559 @item --embedded-relocs
1560 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1561 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1562 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1565 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1567 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1568 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1570 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1571 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1572 @item --fatal-warnings
1573 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1577 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578 @item --force-exe-suffix
1579 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1581 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1588 @kindex --gc-sections
1589 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1590 @cindex garbage collection
1592 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1593 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1594 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1595 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1596 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1600 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1609 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1611 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1612 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1613 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1614 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1615 command in the linker script.
1617 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1618 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1619 @cindex garbage collection
1620 @item --print-gc-sections
1621 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1622 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1623 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1624 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1625 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1626 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1629 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1630 @cindex garbage collection
1631 @item --gc-keep-exported
1632 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1633 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1634 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1635 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1636 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1637 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1638 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1641 @kindex --print-output-format
1642 @cindex output format
1643 @item --print-output-format
1644 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1645 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1646 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1648 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1649 @cindex memory usage
1650 @item --print-memory-usage
1651 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1652 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1653 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1654 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1655 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1658 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1659 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1660 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1667 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1669 @kindex --target-help
1671 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1673 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1674 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1675 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1676 @option{-M} option, above.
1678 @cindex memory usage
1679 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1680 @item --no-keep-memory
1681 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1682 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1683 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1684 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1685 while linking a large executable.
1687 @kindex --no-undefined
1690 @item --no-undefined
1692 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1693 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1694 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1695 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1696 libraries being linked in.
1698 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1700 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1702 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1704 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1705 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1706 first definition will be used.
1708 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1709 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1710 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1711 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1712 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1713 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1714 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1715 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1716 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1718 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1719 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1720 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1723 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1724 libraries specified at link time are that:
1728 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1729 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1730 resolvable at load time.
1732 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1733 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1735 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1736 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1737 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1738 appropriate memset function.
1741 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1742 @item --no-undefined-version
1743 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1744 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1745 will be issued instead.
1747 @kindex --default-symver
1748 @item --default-symver
1749 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1752 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1753 @item --default-imported-symver
1754 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1757 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1758 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1759 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1760 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1761 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1762 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1763 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1764 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1767 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1768 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1769 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1770 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1772 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1773 @item --no-whole-archive
1774 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1777 @cindex output file after errors
1778 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1779 @item --noinhibit-exec
1780 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1781 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1782 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1783 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1787 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1788 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1789 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1791 @ifclear SingleFormat
1792 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1793 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1794 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1795 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1796 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1797 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1798 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1799 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1800 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1801 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1802 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1803 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1804 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1807 @kindex --out-implib
1808 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1809 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1810 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1811 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1812 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1813 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1814 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1815 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1818 @kindex --pic-executable
1820 @itemx --pic-executable
1821 @cindex position independent executables
1822 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1823 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1824 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1825 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1826 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1827 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1831 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1835 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1838 @cindex synthesizing linker
1839 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1843 An option with machine dependent effects.
1845 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1848 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1851 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1854 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1857 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1860 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1863 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1864 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1865 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1866 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1867 instructions, and combining constant values.
1869 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1870 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1872 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1873 family of processors.
1877 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1881 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1882 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1884 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1885 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1886 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1887 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1888 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1889 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1890 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1891 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1895 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1898 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1899 or symbols needed for relocations.
1901 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1902 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1905 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1906 @cindex runtime library search path
1907 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1908 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1909 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1910 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1911 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1912 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1913 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1914 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1915 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1916 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1918 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1919 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1920 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1921 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1922 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1923 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1926 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1927 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1928 the @option{-rpath} option.
1932 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1933 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1934 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1935 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1936 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1939 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1940 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1941 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1942 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1943 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1944 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1945 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1946 appearing multiple times.
1948 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1949 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1950 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1951 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1952 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1954 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1955 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1958 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1959 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1960 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1961 runtime linker would do.
1963 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1967 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1969 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1970 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1971 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1972 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1973 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1974 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1975 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1977 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1978 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1979 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1981 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1982 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1984 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1985 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1987 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1988 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1989 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1990 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1992 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1994 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1995 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1998 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1999 warning and continue with the link.
2006 @cindex shared libraries
2007 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2008 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2009 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2010 undefined symbols in the link.
2012 @kindex --sort-common
2014 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2015 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2016 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2017 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2018 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2019 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2020 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2021 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2023 @kindex --sort-section=name
2024 @item --sort-section=name
2025 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2026 patterns in the linker script.
2028 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2029 @item --sort-section=alignment
2030 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2031 patterns in the linker script.
2033 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2034 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2035 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2036 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2037 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2039 @kindex --split-by-file
2040 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2041 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2042 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2043 size of 1 if not given.
2045 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2046 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2047 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2048 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2049 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2050 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2051 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2052 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2053 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2054 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2055 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2056 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2060 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2061 as execution time and memory usage.
2063 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2064 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2065 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2066 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2067 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2071 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2072 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2074 @kindex --traditional-format
2075 @cindex traditional format
2076 @item --traditional-format
2077 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2078 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2079 use the traditional format instead.
2082 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2083 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2084 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2085 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2086 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2087 combine duplicate entries.
2089 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2090 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2091 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2092 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2093 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2095 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2096 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2097 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2098 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2099 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2101 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2102 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2103 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2104 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2105 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2106 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2107 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2108 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2109 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2111 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2112 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2113 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2114 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2115 byte of the text segment.
2117 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2118 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2119 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2120 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2121 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2122 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2124 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2125 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2126 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2127 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2128 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2130 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2131 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2132 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2133 values for @samp{method}:
2137 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2140 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2142 @item ignore-in-object-files
2143 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2144 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2146 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2147 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2148 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2149 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2150 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2154 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2155 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2157 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2158 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2159 can change this to a warning.
2161 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2162 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2164 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2165 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2166 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2167 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2168 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2170 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2171 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2172 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2173 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2174 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2175 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2176 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2177 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2178 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2179 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2182 @kindex --warn-common
2183 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2184 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2186 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2187 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2188 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2189 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2190 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2191 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2193 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2197 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2201 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2202 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2206 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2207 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2208 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2209 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2210 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2211 a definition of the same variable.
2214 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2215 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2216 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2217 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2222 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2223 definition for the symbol.
2225 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2226 overridden by definition
2227 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2231 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2232 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2233 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2235 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2237 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2241 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2245 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2249 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2251 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2252 overridden by larger common
2253 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2257 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2258 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2259 encountered in a different order.
2261 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2262 overriding smaller common
2263 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2267 @kindex --warn-constructors
2268 @item --warn-constructors
2269 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2270 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2271 detect the use of global constructors.
2273 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2274 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2275 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2276 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2277 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2278 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2279 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2280 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2281 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2282 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2283 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2284 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2285 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2288 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2289 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2291 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2294 @kindex --warn-section-align
2295 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2296 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2297 @item --warn-section-align
2298 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2299 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2300 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2301 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2302 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2304 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2305 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2306 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2308 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2309 @item --warn-alternate-em
2310 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2312 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2313 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2314 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2315 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2316 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2318 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2319 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2320 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2321 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2323 @kindex --whole-archive
2324 @cindex including an entire archive
2325 @item --whole-archive
2326 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2327 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2328 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2329 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2330 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2331 library. This option may be used more than once.
2333 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2334 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2335 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2336 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2337 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2339 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2340 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2341 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2342 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2343 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2346 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2347 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2348 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2349 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2351 Here is a trivial example:
2355 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2357 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2358 return __real_malloc (c);
2362 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2363 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2364 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2365 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2367 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2368 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2369 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2370 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2371 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2373 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2374 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2376 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2377 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2378 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2379 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2381 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2382 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2383 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2384 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2385 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2387 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2388 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2389 @item --enable-new-dtags
2390 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2391 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2392 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2393 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2394 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2395 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2396 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2397 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2399 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2400 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2401 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2402 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2403 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2404 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2405 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2407 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2408 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2409 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2410 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2411 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2412 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2413 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2414 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2416 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2417 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2418 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2419 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2420 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2421 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2422 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2423 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2424 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2425 compressed using zlib.
2427 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2428 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2429 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2430 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2431 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2432 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2434 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2435 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2437 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2438 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2439 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2440 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2442 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2443 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2444 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2445 @option{--help} option.
2447 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2448 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2449 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2450 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2451 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2452 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2454 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2455 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2456 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2459 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2460 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2463 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2465 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2466 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2467 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2468 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2469 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2470 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2471 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2472 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2473 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2474 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2475 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2477 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2478 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2479 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2480 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2481 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2482 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2484 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2485 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2490 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2492 @c man begin OPTIONS
2494 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2495 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2496 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2497 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2498 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2499 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2500 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2503 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2504 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2505 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2506 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2510 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2511 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2512 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2513 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2514 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2517 @item --base-file @var{file}
2518 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2519 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2521 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2525 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2526 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2528 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2530 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2531 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2532 @item --enable-long-section-names
2533 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2534 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2535 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2536 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2537 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2538 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2539 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2540 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2541 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2542 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2543 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2544 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2545 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2546 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2547 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2548 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2549 image and not stripping symbols.
2550 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2552 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2553 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2554 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2555 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2556 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2557 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2558 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2559 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2560 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2561 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2562 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2563 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2564 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2565 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2566 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2567 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2568 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2569 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2571 @kindex --leading-underscore
2572 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2573 @item --leading-underscore
2574 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2575 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2576 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2577 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2579 @cindex DLLs, creating
2580 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2581 @item --export-all-symbols
2582 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2583 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2584 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2585 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2586 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2587 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2588 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2589 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2590 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2591 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2592 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2593 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2594 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2595 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2596 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2597 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2598 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2599 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2600 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2601 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2602 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2603 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2604 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2606 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2607 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2608 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2609 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2610 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2612 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2613 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2614 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2615 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2617 @kindex --file-alignment
2618 @item --file-alignment
2619 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2620 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2622 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2626 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2627 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2628 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2629 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2631 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2634 @kindex --image-base
2635 @item --image-base @var{value}
2636 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2637 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2638 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2639 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2640 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2642 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2646 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2647 symbols before they are exported.
2648 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2650 @kindex --large-address-aware
2651 @item --large-address-aware
2652 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2653 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2654 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2655 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2656 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2657 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2659 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2660 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2661 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2662 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2663 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2664 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2665 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2667 @kindex --major-image-version
2668 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2669 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2670 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2672 @kindex --major-os-version
2673 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2674 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2675 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2677 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2678 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2679 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2680 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2682 @kindex --minor-image-version
2683 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2684 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2685 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2687 @kindex --minor-os-version
2688 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2689 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2692 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2693 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2694 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2695 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2697 @cindex DEF files, creating
2698 @cindex DLLs, creating
2699 @kindex --output-def
2700 @item --output-def @var{file}
2701 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2702 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2703 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2704 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2705 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2706 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2708 @cindex DLLs, creating
2709 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2710 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2711 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2712 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2713 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2714 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2715 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2716 execution are avoided.
2717 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2719 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2720 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2721 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2722 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2724 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2726 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2727 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2728 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2729 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2730 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2731 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2732 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2733 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2734 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2735 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2737 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2738 @item --enable-auto-import
2739 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2740 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2741 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2742 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2745 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2747 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2748 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2749 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2751 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2752 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2753 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2754 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2755 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2757 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2760 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2761 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2763 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2764 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2765 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2766 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2767 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2768 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2769 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2770 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2771 the warning, and exit.
2773 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2774 data type of the exported variable:
2776 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2777 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2778 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2780 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2781 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2782 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2783 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2786 extern type extern_array[];
2788 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2794 extern type extern_array[];
2796 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2799 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2800 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2803 extern struct s extern_struct;
2804 extern_struct.field -->
2805 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2811 extern long long extern_ll;
2813 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2816 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2817 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2818 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2819 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2820 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2821 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2822 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2823 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2831 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2832 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2842 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2843 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2844 volatile int *parr = arr;
2845 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2852 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2853 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2854 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2855 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2859 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2862 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2863 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2867 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2868 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2869 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2872 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2873 @item --disable-auto-import
2874 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2875 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2876 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2878 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2879 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2880 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2881 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2882 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2883 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2884 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2886 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2887 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2888 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2889 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2891 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2892 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2893 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2894 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2896 @kindex --section-alignment
2897 @item --section-alignment
2898 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2899 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2900 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2904 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2905 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2906 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2907 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2909 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2912 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2913 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2914 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2915 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2916 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2917 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2918 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2920 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2922 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2923 of the PE file header:
2924 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2926 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2927 @item --high-entropy-va
2928 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2931 @kindex --dynamicbase
2933 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2934 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2935 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2937 @kindex --forceinteg
2939 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2943 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2944 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2946 @kindex --no-isolation
2947 @item --no-isolation
2948 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2952 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2957 Do not bind this image.
2961 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2965 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2967 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2968 @item --insert-timestamp
2969 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2970 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2971 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2972 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2973 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2974 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2975 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2976 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2983 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2985 @c man begin OPTIONS
2987 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2988 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2989 all executables use an index of 0.
2994 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2995 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2996 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2999 @kindex --dsbt-index
3000 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3001 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3002 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3003 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3004 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3006 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3007 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3008 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3016 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3018 @c man begin OPTIONS
3022 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3024 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3025 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3026 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3027 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3028 the compiler or assembler.
3030 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3031 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3032 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3033 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3034 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3035 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3036 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3037 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3038 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3046 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3048 @c man begin OPTIONS
3050 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3051 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3055 @kindex --no-trampoline
3056 @item --no-trampoline
3057 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3058 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3059 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3061 @kindex --bank-window
3062 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3063 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3064 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3065 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3066 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3074 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3076 @c man begin OPTIONS
3078 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3079 when linking for 68K targets.
3084 @item --got=@var{type}
3085 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3086 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3087 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3088 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3096 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3098 @c man begin OPTIONS
3100 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3101 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3102 linking for MIPS targets.
3110 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3111 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3112 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3113 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3114 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3117 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3118 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3119 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3120 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3121 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3122 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3123 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3124 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3125 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3126 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3127 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3128 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3138 @section Environment Variables
3140 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3142 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3143 @ifclear SingleFormat
3146 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3148 @ifclear SingleFormat
3150 @cindex default input format
3151 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3152 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3153 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3154 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3155 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3156 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3157 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3158 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3159 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3160 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3161 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3165 @cindex default emulation
3166 @cindex emulation, default
3167 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3168 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3169 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3170 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3171 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3172 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3173 linker was configured.
3175 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3176 @cindex demangling, default
3177 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3178 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3179 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3180 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3181 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3188 @chapter Linker Scripts
3191 @cindex linker scripts
3192 @cindex command files
3193 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3194 written in the linker command language.
3196 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3197 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3198 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3199 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3200 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3203 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3204 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3205 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3206 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3207 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3209 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3210 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3211 default linker script.
3213 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3214 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3218 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3219 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3220 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3221 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3222 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3223 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3224 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3225 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3226 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3227 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3228 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3231 @node Basic Script Concepts
3232 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3233 @cindex linker script concepts
3234 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3235 describe the linker script language.
3237 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3238 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3239 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3240 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3241 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3242 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3243 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3244 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3246 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3247 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3248 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3249 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3250 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3251 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3252 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3253 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3254 of debugging information.
3256 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3257 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3258 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3259 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3260 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3261 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3262 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3263 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3264 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3265 RAM address would be the VMA.
3267 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3268 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3270 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3271 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3272 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3273 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3274 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3275 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3276 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3278 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3279 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3283 @section Linker Script Format
3284 @cindex linker script format
3285 Linker scripts are text files.
3287 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3288 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3289 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3292 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3293 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3294 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3295 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3298 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3299 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3302 @node Simple Example
3303 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3304 @cindex linker script example
3305 @cindex example of linker script
3306 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3308 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3309 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3310 memory layout of the output file.
3312 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3313 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3314 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3315 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3316 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3319 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3320 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3321 linker script which will do that:
3326 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3328 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3329 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3333 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3334 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3335 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3337 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3338 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3339 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3340 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3341 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3342 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3343 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3345 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3346 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3347 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3348 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3349 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3350 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3352 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3353 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3354 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3356 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3357 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3358 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3359 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3360 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3361 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3362 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3364 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3365 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3366 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3367 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3368 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3371 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3373 @node Simple Commands
3374 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3375 @cindex linker script simple commands
3376 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3379 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3380 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3381 @ifclear SingleFormat
3382 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3385 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3386 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3390 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3391 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3392 @cindex start of execution
3393 @cindex first instruction
3395 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3396 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3397 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3402 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3403 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3404 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3407 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3409 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3411 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3412 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3413 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3415 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3417 The address @code{0}.
3421 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3422 @cindex linker script file commands
3423 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3426 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3427 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3428 @cindex including a linker script
3429 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3430 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3431 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3434 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3435 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3437 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3438 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3439 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3440 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3441 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3442 @cindex linker script input object files
3443 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3444 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3446 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3447 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3448 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3450 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3451 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3453 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3454 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3455 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3456 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3457 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3458 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3459 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3460 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3461 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3462 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3464 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3465 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3468 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3469 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3470 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3472 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3473 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3474 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3475 @cindex grouping input files
3476 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3477 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3478 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3479 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3481 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3482 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3483 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3484 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3485 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3486 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3487 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3488 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3489 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3490 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3493 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3494 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3495 @cindex output file name in linker script
3496 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3497 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3498 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3499 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3502 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3503 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3505 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3506 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3507 @cindex library search path in linker script
3508 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3509 @cindex search path in linker script
3510 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3511 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3512 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3513 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3514 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3515 the command-line option are searched first.
3517 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3518 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3519 @cindex first input file
3520 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3521 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3522 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3523 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3527 @ifclear SingleFormat
3528 @node Format Commands
3529 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3530 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3533 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3534 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3535 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3536 @cindex output file format in linker script
3537 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3538 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3539 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3540 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3541 line option takes precedence.
3543 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3544 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3545 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3548 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3549 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3550 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3551 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3553 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3556 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3558 This says that the default format for the output file is
3559 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3560 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3563 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3564 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3565 @cindex input file format in linker script
3566 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3567 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3568 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3569 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3570 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3571 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3576 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3577 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3578 @cindex region alias
3579 @cindex region names
3581 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3582 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3585 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3588 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3589 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3590 to memory regions. An example follows.
3592 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3593 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3594 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3595 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3596 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3597 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3602 @code{.text} program code;
3604 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3606 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3608 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3611 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3612 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3613 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3614 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3616 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3617 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3618 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3619 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3620 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3621 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3623 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3624 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3625 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3626 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3628 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3629 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3632 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3645 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3650 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3651 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3659 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3660 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3661 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3664 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3668 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3671 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3672 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3673 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3674 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3677 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3678 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3679 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3683 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3684 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3687 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3688 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3689 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3690 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3693 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3694 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3695 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3696 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3700 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3701 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3702 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3705 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3706 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3707 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3708 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3712 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3713 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3718 extern char data_start [];
3719 extern char data_size [];
3720 extern char data_load_start [];
3722 void copy_data(void)
3724 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3726 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3731 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3732 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3733 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3736 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3738 @cindex assertion in linker script
3739 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3740 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3742 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3743 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3744 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3745 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3746 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3751 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3752 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3753 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3757 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3758 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3759 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3762 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3765 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3766 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3772 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3774 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3775 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3776 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3777 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3778 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3779 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3781 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3782 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3783 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3784 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3785 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3786 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3788 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3789 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3790 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3791 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3792 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3793 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3795 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3796 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3797 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3798 @cindex section groups
3800 This command has the same effect as the
3801 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3802 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3803 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3804 specified (@samp{-r}).
3806 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3808 @cindex insert user script into default script
3809 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3810 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3811 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3812 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3813 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3814 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3815 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3816 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3817 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3818 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3819 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3820 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3821 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3828 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3829 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3835 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3836 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3837 @cindex cross references
3838 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3839 references among certain output sections.
3841 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3842 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3843 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3844 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3845 a function defined in the other section.
3847 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3848 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3849 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3850 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3853 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3854 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3855 @cindex cross references
3856 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3857 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3859 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3860 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3861 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3862 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3863 must never call back.
3865 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3866 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3867 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3868 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3869 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3870 names, not input section names.
3872 @ifclear SingleFormat
3873 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3874 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3875 @cindex machine architecture
3876 @cindex architecture
3877 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3878 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3879 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3880 the @samp{-f} option.
3883 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3884 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3885 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3886 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3887 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3888 @xref{Expression Section}.
3892 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3893 @cindex assignment in scripts
3894 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3895 @cindex variables, defining
3896 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3897 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3900 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3903 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3904 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3907 @node Simple Assignments
3908 @subsection Simple Assignments
3910 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3913 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3914 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3915 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3916 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3917 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3918 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3919 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3920 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3921 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3924 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3925 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3926 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3928 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3929 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3931 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3933 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3935 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3936 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3937 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3939 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3940 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3942 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3943 assignments may be used:
3954 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3955 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3959 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3960 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3961 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3962 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3963 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3968 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3969 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3971 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3975 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3983 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3984 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3988 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3993 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3994 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3995 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3996 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3997 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3998 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3999 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4000 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4002 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4015 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4016 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4017 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4018 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4019 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4020 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4022 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4023 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4024 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4025 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4026 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4028 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4029 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4030 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4031 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4032 hidden and won't be exported.
4034 @node Source Code Reference
4035 @subsection Source Code Reference
4037 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4038 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4039 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4040 symbol that does not have a value.
4042 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4043 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4044 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4045 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4046 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4047 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4048 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4049 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4055 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4061 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4062 transformation has taken place.
4064 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4065 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4066 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4067 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4068 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4069 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4070 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4076 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4077 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4078 number 1000 is initially stored.
4080 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4081 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4082 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4089 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4090 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4097 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4098 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4099 the variable @samp{a}.
4101 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4102 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4103 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4109 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4110 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4111 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4112 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4113 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4115 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4116 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4117 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4118 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4119 linker script contains these declarations:
4123 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4124 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4125 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4129 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4133 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4135 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4139 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4140 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4141 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4145 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4147 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4151 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4155 @section SECTIONS Command
4157 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4158 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4160 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4164 @var{sections-command}
4165 @var{sections-command}
4170 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4174 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4176 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4178 an output section description
4180 an overlay description
4183 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4184 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4185 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4186 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4187 the layout of the output file.
4189 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4192 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4193 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4194 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4195 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4196 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4197 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4200 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4201 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4202 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4203 * Input Section:: Input section description
4204 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4205 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4206 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4207 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4208 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4211 @node Output Section Description
4212 @subsection Output Section Description
4213 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4216 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4218 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4219 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4222 @var{output-section-command}
4223 @var{output-section-command}
4225 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4229 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4231 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4232 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4233 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4234 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4235 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4237 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4241 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4243 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4245 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4247 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4250 @node Output Section Name
4251 @subsection Output Section Name
4252 @cindex name, section
4253 @cindex section name
4254 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4255 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4256 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4257 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4258 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4259 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4260 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4261 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4262 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4263 commas must be quoted.
4265 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4268 @node Output Section Address
4269 @subsection Output Section Address
4270 @cindex address, section
4271 @cindex section address
4272 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4273 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4274 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4276 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4277 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4278 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4279 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4280 contained within the output section.
4282 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4286 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4287 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4291 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4292 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4293 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4294 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4297 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4298 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4306 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4313 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4317 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4318 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4319 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4320 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4323 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4324 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4325 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4326 do something like this:
4328 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4331 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4332 aligned upward to the specified value.
4334 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4335 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4336 sections are ignored).
4339 @subsection Input Section Description
4340 @cindex input sections
4341 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4342 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4344 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4345 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4346 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4347 map the input files into your memory layout.
4350 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4351 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4352 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4353 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4354 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4357 @node Input Section Basics
4358 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4359 @cindex input section basics
4360 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4361 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4363 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4364 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4366 The most common input section description is to include all input
4367 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4368 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4373 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4374 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4375 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4376 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4379 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4382 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4383 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4384 placed inside the section list, for example:
4386 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4389 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4390 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4391 more than one section, as described below.
4393 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4399 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4400 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4401 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4402 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4403 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4404 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4406 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4407 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4408 immediately following section, for example:
4410 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4413 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4414 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4415 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4416 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4417 could be modified to:
4419 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4422 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4423 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4424 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4426 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4429 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4430 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4431 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4436 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4437 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4439 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4444 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4445 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4450 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4451 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4452 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4453 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4454 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4456 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4457 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4458 with no whitespace around the colon.
4462 matches file within archive
4464 matches the whole archive
4466 matches file but not one in an archive
4469 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4470 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4471 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4472 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4473 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4474 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4475 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4476 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4479 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4480 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4481 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4486 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4487 and does not contain any wild card
4488 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4489 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4490 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4491 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4492 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4493 the archive search path.
4495 @node Input Section Wildcards
4496 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4497 @cindex input section wildcards
4498 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4499 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4500 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4501 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4502 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4504 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4505 pattern for the file name.
4507 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4511 matches any number of characters
4513 matches any single character
4515 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4516 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4517 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4519 quotes the following character
4522 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4523 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4524 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4525 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4526 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4527 a @samp{/} character.
4529 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4530 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4531 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4533 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4534 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4535 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4536 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4537 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4539 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4540 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4543 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4544 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4545 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4546 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4547 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4548 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4549 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4551 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4552 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4553 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4554 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4555 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4556 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4558 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4559 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4560 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4561 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4562 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4565 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4567 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4568 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4572 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4573 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4574 sections have the same name.
4576 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4577 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4578 sections have the same alignment.
4580 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4581 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4583 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4584 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4586 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4589 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4590 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4591 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4593 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4594 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4595 treated as nested sorting command.
4599 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4600 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4601 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4603 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4604 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4605 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4608 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4609 command-line option will be ignored.
4612 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4613 section sorting option.
4615 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4616 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4617 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4619 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4620 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4621 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4622 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4623 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4624 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4628 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4629 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4630 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4631 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4636 @node Input Section Common
4637 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4638 @cindex common symbol placement
4639 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4640 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4641 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4642 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4643 named @samp{COMMON}.
4645 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4646 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4647 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4648 input files are placed in another section.
4650 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4651 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4653 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4656 @cindex scommon section
4657 @cindex small common symbols
4658 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4659 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4660 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4661 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4662 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4663 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4664 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4668 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4669 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4672 @node Input Section Keep
4673 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4675 @cindex garbage collection
4676 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4677 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4678 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4679 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4680 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4682 @node Input Section Example
4683 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4684 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4685 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4686 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4687 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4688 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4689 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4690 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4691 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4692 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4720 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4721 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4722 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4723 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4724 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4725 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4726 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4728 @node Output Section Data
4729 @subsection Output Section Data
4731 @cindex section data
4732 @cindex output section data
4733 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4734 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4735 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4736 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4737 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4738 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4739 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4740 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4741 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4742 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4745 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4746 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4747 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4750 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4751 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4757 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4758 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4759 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4760 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4761 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4763 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4764 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4765 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4766 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4767 endianness of the first input object file.
4769 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4770 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4772 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4774 whereas this will work:
4776 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4779 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4780 @cindex holes, filling
4781 @cindex unspecified memory
4782 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4783 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4784 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4785 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4786 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4787 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4788 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4789 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4790 different parts of an output section.
4792 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4798 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4799 section attribute, but it only affects the
4800 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4801 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4802 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4805 @node Output Section Keywords
4806 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4807 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4811 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4812 @cindex input filename symbols
4813 @cindex filename symbols
4814 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4815 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4816 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4817 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4818 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4820 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4821 normally used for any other object file format.
4823 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4824 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4825 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4827 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4828 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4829 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4830 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4831 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4832 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4833 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4834 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4835 ignored for other object file formats.
4837 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4838 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4839 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4840 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4841 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4842 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4843 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4844 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4845 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4846 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4847 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4850 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4851 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4852 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4853 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4854 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4855 runtime code expects to see.
4859 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4864 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4870 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4871 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4872 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4873 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4874 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4875 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4876 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4879 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4880 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4881 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4886 @node Output Section Discarding
4887 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4888 @cindex discarding sections
4889 @cindex sections, discarding
4890 @cindex removing sections
4891 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4892 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4893 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4895 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4898 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4899 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4900 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4901 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4902 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4903 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4904 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4905 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4906 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4908 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4909 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4910 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4911 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4912 section is discarded.
4915 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4916 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4917 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4919 @node Output Section Attributes
4920 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4921 @cindex output section attributes
4922 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4927 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4929 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4930 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4933 @var{output-section-command}
4934 @var{output-section-command}
4936 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4940 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4941 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4942 remaining section attributes.
4945 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4946 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4947 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4948 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4949 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4950 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4951 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4952 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4955 @node Output Section Type
4956 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4957 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4958 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4962 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4963 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4968 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4969 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4970 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4971 section when the program is run.
4975 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4976 @cindex loading, preventing
4977 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4978 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4979 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4980 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4981 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4985 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4991 @node Output Section LMA
4992 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4993 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4994 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4995 @cindex load address
4996 @cindex section load address
4997 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4998 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4999 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5000 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5001 address is optional.
5003 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5004 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5005 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5006 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5007 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5009 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5010 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5015 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5016 the LMA address as well.
5019 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5022 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5023 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5024 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5025 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5026 the last section in the located region.
5029 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5030 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5033 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5034 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5037 @cindex ROM initialized data
5038 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5039 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5040 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5041 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5042 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5043 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5044 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5045 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5046 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5052 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5054 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5055 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5057 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5062 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5063 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5064 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5065 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5070 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5071 char *src = &_etext;
5074 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5075 while (dst < &_edata)
5079 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5084 @node Forced Output Alignment
5085 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5086 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5087 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5088 @cindex output section alignment
5089 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5090 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5091 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5093 @node Forced Input Alignment
5094 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5095 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5096 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5097 @cindex input section alignment
5098 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5099 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5100 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5102 @node Output Section Constraint
5103 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5106 @cindex constraints on output sections
5107 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5108 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5109 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5110 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5112 @node Output Section Region
5113 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5114 @kindex >@var{region}
5115 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5116 @cindex memory regions and sections
5117 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5118 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5120 Here is a simple example:
5123 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5124 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5128 @node Output Section Phdr
5129 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5131 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5132 @cindex program headers and sections
5133 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5134 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5135 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5136 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5137 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5138 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5140 Here is a simple example:
5143 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5144 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5148 @node Output Section Fill
5149 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5150 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5151 @cindex section fill pattern
5152 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5153 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5154 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5155 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5156 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5157 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5158 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5159 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5160 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5161 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5162 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5163 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5164 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5166 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5167 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5169 Here is a simple example:
5172 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5176 @node Overlay Description
5177 @subsection Overlay Description
5180 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5181 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5182 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5183 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5184 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5185 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5188 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5189 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5190 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5191 command is as follows:
5194 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5198 @var{output-section-command}
5199 @var{output-section-command}
5201 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5204 @var{output-section-command}
5205 @var{output-section-command}
5207 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5209 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5213 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5214 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5215 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5216 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5217 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5218 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5220 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5221 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5223 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5224 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5225 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5226 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5227 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5228 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5230 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5231 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5232 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5233 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5234 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5236 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5237 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5238 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5239 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5240 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5241 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5242 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5244 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5245 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5247 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5248 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5251 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5253 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5254 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5259 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5260 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5261 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5262 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5263 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5264 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5266 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5271 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5272 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5273 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5277 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5278 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5279 example could have been written identically as follows.
5283 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5284 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5285 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5286 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5287 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5288 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5289 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5294 @section MEMORY Command
5296 @cindex memory regions
5297 @cindex regions of memory
5298 @cindex allocating memory
5299 @cindex discontinuous memory
5300 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5301 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5303 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5304 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5305 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5306 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5307 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5308 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5309 around to fit into the available regions.
5311 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5312 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5313 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5319 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5325 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5326 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5327 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5328 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5329 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5330 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5333 @cindex memory region attributes
5334 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5335 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5336 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5337 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5338 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5339 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5340 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5342 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5357 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5360 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5361 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5362 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5363 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5369 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5370 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5371 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5372 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5378 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5379 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5380 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5381 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5383 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5384 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5385 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5386 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5387 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5388 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5389 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5396 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5397 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5402 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5403 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5404 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5405 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5406 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5407 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5408 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5409 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5410 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5412 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5413 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5414 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5418 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5423 @section PHDRS Command
5425 @cindex program headers
5426 @cindex ELF program headers
5427 @cindex program segments
5428 @cindex segments, ELF
5429 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5430 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5431 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5432 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5434 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5435 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5436 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5437 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5438 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5440 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5441 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5442 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5443 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5444 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5446 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5447 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5448 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5450 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5451 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5457 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5458 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5463 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5464 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5465 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5466 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5467 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5468 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5470 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5471 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5472 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5473 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5474 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5477 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5478 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5479 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5480 contain the section.
5482 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5483 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5484 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5485 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5486 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5487 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5492 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5493 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5494 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5495 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5496 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5497 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5500 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5501 value of the keyword.
5504 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5505 Indicates an unused program header.
5507 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5508 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5511 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5512 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5514 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5515 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5518 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5519 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5521 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5522 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5525 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5526 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5528 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5529 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5531 @item @var{expression}
5532 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5533 be used for types not defined above.
5536 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5537 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5538 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5539 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5540 output section attribute.
5542 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5543 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5544 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5545 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5548 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5549 headers used on a native ELF system.
5555 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5557 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5559 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5565 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5566 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5567 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5569 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5570 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5571 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5578 @section VERSION Command
5579 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5580 @cindex symbol versions
5581 @cindex version script
5582 @cindex versions of symbols
5583 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5584 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5585 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5586 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5589 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5590 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5591 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5593 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5595 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5598 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5599 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5600 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5601 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5602 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5603 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5606 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5632 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5633 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5634 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5635 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5636 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5637 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5638 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5639 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5640 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5641 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5643 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5644 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5645 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5647 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5648 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5649 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5651 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5652 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5653 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5654 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5655 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5656 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5657 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5658 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5659 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5661 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5662 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5663 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5664 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5666 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5667 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5668 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5672 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5675 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5676 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5677 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5678 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5679 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5680 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5681 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5682 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5683 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5684 search for each symbol reference.
5686 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5687 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5688 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5689 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5690 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5691 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5692 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5693 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5694 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5696 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5697 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5698 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5699 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5700 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5702 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5705 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5706 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5707 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5708 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5709 takes precedence over a version script.
5711 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5712 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5713 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5714 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5715 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5717 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5718 source file. Here is an example:
5721 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5722 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5723 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5724 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5727 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5728 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5729 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5730 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5732 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5733 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5734 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5735 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5736 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5737 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5739 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5740 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5741 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5742 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5744 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5747 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5750 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5751 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5752 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5753 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5754 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5756 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5757 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5758 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5759 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5760 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5761 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5762 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5763 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5764 expect when you upgrade.
5767 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5770 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5771 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5772 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5773 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5775 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5777 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5781 * Constants:: Constants
5782 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5783 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5784 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5785 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5786 * Operators:: Operators
5787 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5788 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5789 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5793 @subsection Constants
5794 @cindex integer notation
5795 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5796 All constants are integers.
5798 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5799 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5800 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5801 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5802 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5803 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5805 @cindex scaled integers
5806 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5807 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5808 @cindex suffixes for integers
5809 @cindex integer suffixes
5810 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5814 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5815 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5819 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5821 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5822 respectively. For example, the following
5823 all refer to the same quantity:
5832 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5833 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5835 @node Symbolic Constants
5836 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5837 @cindex symbolic constants
5839 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5840 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5845 The target's maximum page size.
5847 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5848 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5849 The target's default page size.
5855 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5858 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5859 supported by the target.
5862 @subsection Symbol Names
5863 @cindex symbol names
5865 @cindex quoted symbol names
5867 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5868 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5869 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5870 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5871 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5874 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5877 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5878 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5879 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5881 @node Orphan Sections
5882 @subsection Orphan Sections
5884 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5885 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5886 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5887 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5888 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5890 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5891 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5892 placed at the end of that output section.
5894 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5895 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5896 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5897 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5898 one new output section.
5900 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5901 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5902 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5903 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5904 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5905 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5906 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5908 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5909 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5910 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5912 @node Location Counter
5913 @subsection The Location Counter
5916 @cindex location counter
5917 @cindex current output location
5918 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5919 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5920 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5921 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5922 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5925 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5926 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5927 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5928 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5929 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5945 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5946 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5947 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5948 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5949 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5950 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5952 @cindex dot inside sections
5953 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5954 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5955 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5956 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5957 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5958 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5976 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5977 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5978 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5979 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5980 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5981 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5982 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5983 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5985 @cindex dot outside sections
5986 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5987 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5988 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5994 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5998 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6003 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6004 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6005 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6006 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6007 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6008 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6009 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6010 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6011 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6012 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6019 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6023 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6024 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6029 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6030 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6031 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6032 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6033 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6034 section. So you could write:
6040 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6045 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6050 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6051 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6055 @subsection Operators
6056 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6057 @cindex arithmetic operators
6058 @cindex precedence in expressions
6059 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6060 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6063 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6065 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6071 5 left == != > < <= >=
6077 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6081 (1) Prefix operators
6082 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6086 \vskip \baselineskip
6087 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6088 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6091 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6092 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6093 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6094 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6096 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6098 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6099 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6100 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6103 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6106 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6109 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6111 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6116 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6117 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6118 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6121 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6124 @subsection Evaluation
6125 @cindex lazy evaluation
6126 @cindex expression evaluation order
6127 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6128 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6130 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6131 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6132 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6133 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6135 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6136 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6137 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6138 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6140 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6141 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6144 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6145 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6147 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6148 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6154 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6160 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6163 @node Expression Section
6164 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6165 @cindex expression sections
6166 @cindex absolute expressions
6167 @cindex relative expressions
6168 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6169 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6170 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6171 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6172 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6173 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6174 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6175 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6178 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6179 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6180 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6181 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6182 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6183 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6184 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6185 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6186 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6187 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6188 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6189 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6190 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6193 In the following simple example,
6200 __executable_start = 0x100;
6204 __data_start = 0x10;
6212 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6213 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6214 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6215 section in the second two assignments.
6217 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6218 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6222 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6223 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6224 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6226 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6227 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6228 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6230 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6231 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6232 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6233 before applying the operator.
6236 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6240 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6242 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6244 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6245 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6246 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6247 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6248 but an absolute address otherwise.
6250 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6251 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6252 section as the relative operand(s).
6254 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6255 conversions) is an absolute address.
6258 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6259 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6260 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6261 section @samp{.data}:
6265 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6269 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6270 @samp{.data} section.
6272 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6273 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6275 @node Builtin Functions
6276 @subsection Builtin Functions
6277 @cindex functions in expressions
6278 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6279 use in linker script expressions.
6282 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6283 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6284 @cindex expression, absolute
6285 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6286 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6287 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6288 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6290 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6291 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6292 @cindex section address in expression
6293 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6294 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6295 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6296 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6297 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6298 the other two will be absolute:
6304 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6309 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6310 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6316 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6317 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6318 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6319 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6320 @cindex round up location counter
6321 @cindex align location counter
6322 @cindex round up expression
6323 @cindex align expression
6324 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6325 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6326 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6327 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6328 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6329 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6331 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6332 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6333 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6338 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6340 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6346 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6347 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6348 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6349 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6351 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6353 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6354 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6355 @cindex section alignment
6356 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6357 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6358 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6359 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6360 value in that section.
6365 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6372 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6373 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6374 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6375 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6378 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6379 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6380 This is equivalent to either
6382 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6386 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6387 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6390 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6391 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6392 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6393 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6394 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6395 bytes in the on-disk file.
6397 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6398 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6399 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6400 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6401 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6402 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6403 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6408 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6411 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6412 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6413 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6414 evaluation purposes.
6417 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6420 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6421 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6422 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6423 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6424 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6425 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6426 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6427 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6428 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6429 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6430 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6434 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6437 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6438 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6439 @cindex symbol defaults
6440 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6441 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6442 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6443 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6444 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6445 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6446 existed, its value is preserved:
6452 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6460 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6461 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6462 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6464 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6465 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6466 @cindex section load address in expression
6467 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6470 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6471 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6472 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6473 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6476 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6477 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6480 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6481 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6483 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6484 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6485 @cindex unallocated address, next
6486 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6487 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6488 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6489 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6491 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6492 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6493 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6495 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6496 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6497 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6498 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6499 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6500 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6501 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6502 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6505 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6506 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6507 @cindex section size
6508 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6509 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6510 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6511 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6520 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6521 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6526 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6527 @itemx sizeof_headers
6528 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6530 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6531 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6532 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6533 choose, to facilitate paging.
6535 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6536 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6537 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6538 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6539 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6540 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6541 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6542 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6543 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6544 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6545 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6546 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6549 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6550 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6551 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6552 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6553 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6554 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6555 linker will report an error.
6557 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6559 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6560 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6563 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6564 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6565 read. This can affect archive searching.
6568 @node Machine Dependent
6569 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6571 @cindex machine dependencies
6572 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6573 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6574 functionality are not listed.
6578 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6581 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6584 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6587 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6590 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6593 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6596 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6599 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6602 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6605 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6608 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6611 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6614 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6617 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6620 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6623 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6626 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6637 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6639 @cindex H8/300 support
6640 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6641 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6644 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6645 @item relaxing address modes
6646 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6647 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6648 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6651 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6652 @item synthesizing instructions
6653 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6654 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6655 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6656 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6657 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6658 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6659 top page of memory).
6661 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6662 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6663 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6664 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6665 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6666 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6667 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6669 @item bit manipulation instructions
6670 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6671 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6672 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6673 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6674 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6675 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6676 the top page of memory).
6678 @item system control instructions
6679 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6680 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6681 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6682 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6683 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6684 the top page of memory).
6694 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6695 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6697 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6699 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6700 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6701 options are required for these chips.
6715 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6716 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6718 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6720 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6722 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6723 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6726 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6727 @item relaxing address modes
6728 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6729 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6730 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6733 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6734 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6735 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6737 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6738 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6739 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6740 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6741 @code{bset} instructions.
6745 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6747 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6748 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6749 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6750 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6751 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6752 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6753 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6754 point to the function trampoline.
6762 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6764 @cindex ARM interworking support
6765 @kindex --support-old-code
6766 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6767 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6768 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6769 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6770 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6771 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6772 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6773 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6774 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6775 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6777 @cindex thumb entry point
6778 @cindex entry point, thumb
6779 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6780 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6781 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6782 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6783 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6784 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6786 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6787 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6788 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6789 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6790 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6791 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6795 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6796 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6797 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6798 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6802 @kindex --target1-rel
6803 @kindex --target1-abs
6804 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6805 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6806 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6807 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6810 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6811 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6812 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6813 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6816 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6818 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6820 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6825 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6826 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6827 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6828 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6830 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6831 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6832 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6834 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6835 relocations are ignored.
6837 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6838 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6839 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6840 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6848 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6849 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6850 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6854 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6855 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6856 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6857 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6858 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6860 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6861 specify it if you are using that target.
6863 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6864 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6865 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6866 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6867 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6868 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6869 the support code can read the intended values.
6871 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6872 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6873 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6874 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6875 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6876 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6878 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6879 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6880 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6881 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6882 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6883 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6885 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6886 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6887 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6888 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6889 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6890 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6891 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6893 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6894 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6895 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6896 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6897 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6898 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6899 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6901 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6902 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6903 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6905 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6906 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6908 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6909 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6910 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6911 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6912 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6913 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6914 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6915 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6917 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6918 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6920 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6921 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6922 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6923 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6924 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6926 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6927 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6928 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6929 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6930 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6931 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6933 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6934 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6936 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6937 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6938 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6941 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6942 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6943 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6944 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6947 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6948 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6949 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6950 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6951 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6952 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6953 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6956 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6957 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6958 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6959 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6960 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6961 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6962 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6965 @kindex --pic-veneer
6966 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6967 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6968 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6969 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6971 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6972 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6973 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6974 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6975 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6976 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6977 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6978 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6979 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6980 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6981 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6982 where they should be placed.
6984 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6985 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6986 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6987 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6988 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6989 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6990 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6991 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6992 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6993 from the input sections.
6995 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6998 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6999 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7002 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7003 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7004 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7005 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7007 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7009 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7010 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7011 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7012 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7014 Please contact ARM for further details.
7016 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7017 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7018 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7019 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7022 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7023 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7024 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7025 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7027 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7028 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7029 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7030 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7032 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7033 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7034 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7035 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7038 @kindex --cmse-implib
7039 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7040 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7041 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7042 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7043 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7045 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7046 @cindex Input import library
7047 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7048 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7049 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7050 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7051 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7052 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7053 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7054 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7068 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7069 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7070 @kindex --multi-subspace
7071 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7072 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7073 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7074 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7075 multiple sub-spaces.
7077 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7078 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7079 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7080 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7081 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7082 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7083 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7084 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7085 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7086 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7087 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7088 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7089 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7090 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7091 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7092 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7094 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7095 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7096 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7097 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7110 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7112 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7113 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7114 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7115 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7116 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7117 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7118 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7119 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7120 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7121 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7123 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7124 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7125 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7126 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7139 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7141 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7144 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7145 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7146 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7147 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7148 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7149 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7151 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7152 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7153 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7154 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7155 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7156 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7157 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7158 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7159 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7160 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7161 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7162 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7175 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7176 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7177 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7178 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7179 can translate between the two formats.
7181 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7182 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7183 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7184 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7185 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7186 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7187 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7188 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7190 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7191 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7192 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7195 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7196 are left out from an mmo file.
7209 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7210 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7211 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7212 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7214 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7215 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7218 @item @samp{.vectors}
7219 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7221 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7222 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7223 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7225 @item @samp{.infomem}
7226 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7227 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7229 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7230 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7231 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7233 @item @samp{.noinit}
7234 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7236 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7240 @cindex MSP430 Options
7241 @kindex --code-region
7242 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7243 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7244 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7247 @kindex --data-region
7248 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7249 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7250 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7251 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7253 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7254 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7255 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7256 and @code{--data-region} options.
7257 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7258 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7259 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7273 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7274 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7275 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7276 relaxes objects according to these options.
7279 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7280 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7282 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7283 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7285 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7286 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7288 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7289 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7291 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7292 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7294 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7295 Update the existing EX9 table.
7297 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7298 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7300 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7301 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7303 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7304 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7306 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7307 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7321 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7322 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7323 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7325 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7326 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7327 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7328 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7329 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7330 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7331 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7332 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7333 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7336 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7337 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7338 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7339 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7340 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7341 register as a temporary.
7343 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7344 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7345 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7358 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7359 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7360 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7361 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7362 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7363 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7364 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7365 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7366 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7367 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7368 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7369 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7370 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7372 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7377 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7378 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7379 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7380 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7381 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7382 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7383 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7384 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7386 @kindex --secure-plt
7388 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7389 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7390 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7391 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7397 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7398 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7399 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7400 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7401 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7402 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7403 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7404 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7405 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7406 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7407 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7408 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7410 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7411 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7412 @item --emit-stub-syms
7413 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7414 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7416 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7417 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7418 @item --no-tls-optimize
7419 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7420 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7421 disable the optimization.
7434 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7435 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7437 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7439 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7440 @kindex --stub-group-size
7441 @item --stub-group-size
7442 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7443 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7444 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7445 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7446 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7447 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7448 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7449 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7450 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7451 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7452 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7453 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7454 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7455 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7457 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7458 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7459 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7460 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7462 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7463 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7464 @item --emit-stub-syms
7465 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7466 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7468 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7470 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7473 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7474 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7475 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7476 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7477 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7478 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7479 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7480 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7483 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7484 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7485 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7486 @item --save-restore-funcs
7487 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7488 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7489 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7490 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7491 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7494 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7495 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7496 @item --no-tls-optimize
7497 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7498 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7499 disable the optimization.
7501 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7502 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7503 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7504 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7505 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7506 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7507 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7508 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7509 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7510 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7511 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7512 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7513 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7514 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7515 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7517 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7518 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7519 @item --no-opd-optimize
7520 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7521 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7522 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7523 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7525 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7526 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7527 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7528 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7529 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7530 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7531 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7533 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7534 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7535 @item --no-toc-optimize
7536 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7537 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7538 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7539 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7540 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7541 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7542 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7543 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7544 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7545 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7546 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7549 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7550 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7551 @item --no-multi-toc
7552 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7553 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7555 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7556 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7557 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7558 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7559 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7560 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7561 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7562 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7564 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7565 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7567 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7568 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7569 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7570 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7571 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7572 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7573 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7576 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7578 @kindex --no-plt-align
7580 @itemx --no-plt-align
7581 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7582 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7583 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7584 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7585 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7586 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7587 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7589 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7590 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7591 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7592 @item --plt-static-chain
7593 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7594 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7595 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7596 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7598 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7599 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7600 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7601 @item --plt-thread-safe
7602 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7603 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7604 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7605 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7606 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7607 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7608 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7609 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7610 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7613 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7614 @kindex --plt-localentry
7615 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7616 @item --plt-localentry
7617 @itemx --no-localentry
7618 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7619 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7620 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7621 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7622 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7623 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7624 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7625 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7626 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7627 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7628 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7629 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7643 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7645 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7649 @kindex --s390-pgste
7651 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7652 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7653 binaries marked that way.
7667 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7669 @cindex SPU ELF options
7675 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7677 @cindex SPU overlays
7678 @kindex --no-overlays
7680 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7681 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7682 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7683 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7685 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7686 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7687 @item --emit-stub-syms
7688 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7689 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7691 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7692 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7693 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7694 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7695 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7696 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7698 @cindex SPU local store size
7699 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7700 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7701 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7702 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7703 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7706 @kindex --stack-analysis
7707 @item --stack-analysis
7708 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7709 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7710 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7711 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7712 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7713 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7714 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7715 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7716 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7717 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7718 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7719 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7720 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7721 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7722 and calls will be given.
7725 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7726 @item --emit-stack-syms
7727 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7728 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7729 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7730 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7731 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7732 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7733 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7734 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7748 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7749 @cindex TI COFF versions
7750 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7751 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7752 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7753 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7754 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7755 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7768 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7770 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7771 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7772 command-line options mentioned here.
7775 @cindex import libraries
7776 @item import libraries
7777 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7778 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7779 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7780 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7781 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7782 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7784 @item exporting DLL symbols
7785 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7786 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7789 @item using auto-export functionality
7790 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7791 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7792 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7795 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7796 @item --exclude-symbols
7797 @item --exclude-libs
7798 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7799 @item --version-script
7802 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7803 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7804 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7805 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7806 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7807 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7808 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7809 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7811 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7812 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7813 if either of the following are true:
7816 @item A DEF file is used.
7817 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7820 @item using a DEF file
7821 @cindex using a DEF file
7822 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7823 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7824 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7825 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7826 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7829 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7832 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7833 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7835 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7838 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7844 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7850 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7851 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7852 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7853 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7854 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7855 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7856 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7857 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7858 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7860 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7861 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7862 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7864 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7865 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7866 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7867 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7869 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7870 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7871 non-default base address for the image.
7873 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7874 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7875 filename specified on the command line.
7877 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7881 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7882 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7883 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7886 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7887 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7888 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7889 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7890 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7891 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7892 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7894 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7896 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7897 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7898 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7899 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7900 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7902 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7903 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7904 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7907 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7908 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7909 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7910 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7911 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7912 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7913 application will behave unexpectedly.
7915 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7916 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7917 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7918 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7919 the DLL without an import library.
7921 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7922 other DEF file statements
7924 @cindex creating a DEF file
7925 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7926 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
7928 @item Using decorations
7929 @cindex Using decorations
7930 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7931 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7935 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7936 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7939 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7940 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7941 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7942 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7944 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7945 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7949 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7950 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7953 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7954 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7955 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7956 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7957 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7958 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7959 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7963 @cindex automatic data imports
7964 @item automatic data imports
7965 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7966 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7967 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7968 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7969 code to these platforms, especially for large
7970 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7971 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7972 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7973 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7974 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7975 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7976 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7977 trigger the feature's use.
7979 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7980 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7982 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7983 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7985 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7986 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7987 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7990 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7991 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7992 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7993 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7994 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7995 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7996 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7997 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8000 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8001 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8002 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8003 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8004 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8005 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8006 run without error on an older system.
8008 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8011 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8012 @item direct linking to a dll
8013 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8014 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8015 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8016 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8017 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8018 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8019 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8020 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8021 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8022 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8024 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8025 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8026 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8027 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8028 select the dll instead of an import library.
8031 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8032 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8045 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8047 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8048 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8049 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8050 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8053 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8054 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8055 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8056 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8057 could coexist on the same machine.
8059 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8060 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8061 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8067 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8068 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8071 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8074 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8076 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8079 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8080 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8081 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8082 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8084 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8085 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8086 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8090 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8093 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8096 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8099 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8106 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8109 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8110 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8111 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8113 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8114 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8116 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8117 work with auto-imported data.
8119 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8120 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8121 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8122 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8123 possible to do this without an import lib.
8125 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8126 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8127 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8128 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8130 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8131 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8132 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8133 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8134 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8135 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8136 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8138 @item symbol aliasing
8140 @item adding additional names
8141 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8142 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8143 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8144 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8145 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8148 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8155 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8157 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8158 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8161 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8162 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8165 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8168 @item renaming symbols
8169 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8170 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8171 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8172 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8173 created). In the following example:
8176 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8182 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8186 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8187 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8188 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8189 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8190 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8191 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8192 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8193 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8194 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8195 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8196 which is probably not what you wanted.
8198 @cindex weak externals
8199 @item weak externals
8200 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8201 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8202 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8203 are three variants of weak externals:
8205 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8206 called lazy externals.
8207 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8208 This form is not presently implemented.
8209 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8212 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8213 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8214 uses a default value.
8216 @cindex aligned common symbols
8217 @item aligned common symbols
8218 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8219 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8220 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8221 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8222 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8223 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8224 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8225 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8240 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8242 @cindex Xtensa processors
8243 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8244 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8245 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8246 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8247 example, with the command:
8259 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8260 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8261 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8262 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8263 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8264 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8265 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8267 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8268 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8269 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8270 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8271 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8272 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8273 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8274 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8275 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8276 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8277 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8278 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8280 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8281 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8282 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8283 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8284 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8285 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8286 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8287 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8288 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8289 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8290 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8291 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8292 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8293 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8295 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8298 @cindex Xtensa options
8301 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8302 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8303 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8304 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8305 preserve the correctness of the code.
8313 @ifclear SingleFormat
8318 @cindex object file management
8319 @cindex object formats available
8321 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8322 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8323 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8324 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8325 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8326 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8327 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8328 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8329 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8331 @cindex BFD requirements
8332 @cindex requirements for BFD
8333 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8334 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8335 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8336 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8337 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8338 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8339 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8341 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8342 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8343 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8344 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8347 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8351 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8352 @cindex opening object files
8353 @include bfdsumm.texi
8356 @node Reporting Bugs
8357 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8358 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8359 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8361 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8363 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8364 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8365 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8366 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8369 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8370 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8373 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8374 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8378 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8379 @cindex bug criteria
8381 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8384 @cindex fatal signal
8385 @cindex linker crash
8386 @cindex crash of linker
8388 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8389 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8391 @cindex error on valid input
8393 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8395 @cindex invalid input
8397 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8398 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8399 object files are correct.
8402 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8403 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8407 @section How to Report Bugs
8409 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8411 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8412 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8413 recommend you contact that organization first.
8415 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8416 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8420 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8424 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8425 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8426 fact or leave it out, state it!
8428 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8429 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8430 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8431 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8432 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8433 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8434 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8435 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8436 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8437 and the most helpful.
8439 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8440 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8441 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8443 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8444 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8445 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8446 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8448 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8452 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8453 the @samp{--version} argument.
8455 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8456 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8459 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8460 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8463 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8467 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8471 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8472 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8473 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8476 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8477 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8480 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8481 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8482 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8483 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8484 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8485 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8486 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8487 attachments are best.
8489 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8490 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8491 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8492 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8493 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8496 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8497 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8499 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8500 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8501 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8502 a chance to make a mistake.
8504 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8505 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8506 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8507 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8508 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8509 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8510 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8511 any conclusion from our observations.
8514 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8515 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8516 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8517 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8518 context, not by line number.
8520 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8521 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8524 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8528 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8530 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8531 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8532 changes will not affect it.
8534 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8535 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8536 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8537 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8539 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8540 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8541 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8542 less time, and so on.
8544 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8545 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8548 A patch for the bug.
8550 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8551 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8552 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8553 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8555 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8556 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8557 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8558 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8561 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8562 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8563 help us to understand.
8566 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8568 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8569 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8573 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8574 @cindex MRI compatibility
8575 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8576 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8577 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8578 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8579 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8580 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8581 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8583 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8584 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8585 features to make use of them.
8587 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8588 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8590 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8591 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8592 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8593 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8594 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8596 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8598 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8599 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8600 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8603 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8604 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8605 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8606 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8607 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8608 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8609 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8610 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8611 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8612 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8613 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8615 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8616 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8617 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8618 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8620 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8622 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8623 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8624 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8625 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8627 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8628 @item BASE @var{expression}
8629 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8630 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8632 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8633 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8634 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8635 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8637 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8639 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8641 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8642 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8643 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8644 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8646 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8647 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8648 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8649 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8651 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8652 same line, with no change in its effect.
8654 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8655 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8656 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8657 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8658 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8661 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8662 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8663 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8664 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8665 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8667 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8668 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8669 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8670 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8671 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8672 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8673 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8674 file, in the order specified.
8676 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8677 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8678 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8679 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8680 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8681 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8683 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8684 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8685 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8686 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8687 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8688 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8689 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8690 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8693 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8694 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8698 @unnumbered LD Index
8703 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8705 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8706 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8707 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8708 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8709 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8710 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8711 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8712 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8714 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.